Challenger
O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
2 0 1 0
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 77
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................159
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................241
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 337
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................369
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................425
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 443
10
INDEX
...................................................................453
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ............ 12
▫ KeyFOB ........................... 13
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition ......... 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 16
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm ................... 18
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 18
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry ...................... 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 21
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 23
▫ Remote Open Window Feature ............ 24
2
▫ To Open The Trunk .................... 24
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 25
▫ General Information ................... 25
䡵 Remote Starting System .................. 26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 26
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 30
䡵 Windows ............................ 32
▫ Power Windows ...................... 32
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 33
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ................. 34
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning ................... 35
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ............... 35
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 37
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 42
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 42
▫ Energy Management Feature ............. 43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 44
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 46
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 46
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbags ............................ 47
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 53
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 60
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 61
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 70
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 71
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 71
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 73
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 75
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/
RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
1 — OFF
2 — ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key
Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)
will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start-
ing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. This condition will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in OFF.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if both doors and the trunk are closed, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 sec-
onds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash. If it does not illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm
is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the
arming period, the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the
arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security
Alarm after closing the door, you must repeat one of the
previously-described arming sequences.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button until the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates
that the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting
Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information). Then either press the power door LOCK
switch while the driver or passenger door is open, or
press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK
button.
To Disarm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires
at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle), or insert a valid
Key Fob into the ignition switch (if the Start/Stop button
is removed) and rotate it to the ON/RUN position.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is placed in ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Key Fob with RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Remote Open Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
To Open The Trunk
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
operation.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
•
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will
display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once
inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display in the
EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
•
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go fea-
ture, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will dis-
play in the EVIC until you push the START button.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Power Door Lock Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The driver door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
•
When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
OFF and ON/RUN and then back to OFF four times
ending up in the LOCK position. However, do not start
the engine.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea-
ture. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-
mize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter twice within five seconds.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release
Button
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
— if equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident best.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt
is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate
will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate
and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passen-
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warn-
ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-
activating the BeltAlert威.
1. With both doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat
belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this pro-
cedure.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tion. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-
bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
Advanced Front Airbag and Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbags
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE:
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Airbag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Being too close to the SABIC airbags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air-
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla-
tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the right side of the instrument panel. When the
ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front
Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front
Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible,
based on the collision type and severity. The steering
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the
airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time
it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
airbag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
In an collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should never install LATCH-compatible
child seats so that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-
seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
cle’s seat belts.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
LATCH Anchorages
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchor-
age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the
anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 81
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 81
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 82
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .......... 82
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 83
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 83
▫ Vanity Mirrors ....................... 83
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .............. 84
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor ........................... 84
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 85
▫ Operation .......................... 87
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 95
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features .............. 98
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 103
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 105
▫ General Information .................. 113
3
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 113
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 113
▫ Commands ........................ 115
▫ Voice Training ...................... 118
䡵 Seats .............................. 118
▫ Power Seats ........................ 118
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline ........... 120
▫ Lumbar Support ..................... 121
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 121
▫ Heated Seats ....................... 122
▫ Easy Entry Seats ..................... 124
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 124
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 126
䡵 Lights ............................. 127
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 127
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 128
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 128
▫ Headlight Time Delay ................. 128
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 129
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 129
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 129
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 130
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 130
▫ Lane Change Assist ................... 131
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 131
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 131
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .... 132
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 133
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 134
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 134
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 135
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 135
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 135
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .......... 136
䡵 Electronic Speed Control ................ 137
▫ To Activate ......................... 138
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 138
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 138
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 139
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 140
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 141
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 141
▫ Sunglasses Storage ................... 141
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 142
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 143
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 146
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 147
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button ............................ 147
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
▫ Security ........................... 147
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 147
▫ General Information .................. 148
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 149
▫ Opening Sunroof — Partially ............ 150
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 150
▫ Closing Sunroof — Partially ............. 150
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 150
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 151
▫ Pinch Protect Override ................ 151
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 151
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 151
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 151
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 152
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 152
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 152
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 152
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 155
▫ Front Cupholders .................... 155
▫ Rear Cupholders ..................... 156
䡵 Console Features ...................... 156
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest .......... 156
▫ Console Storage ..................... 157
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 158
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 158
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Power Mirror Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” and Extender Features of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Slide-On-Rod Extender
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
(Voice Command button) that will en-
able you to access the system.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your cellular phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
could press the
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switch can be
moved forward and backward as well as up and down to
control the position of the seat. The power seatback
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback. Push
forward or rearward on the switch to change the position
of the seatback.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Control
2 — Power Seatback Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean
back to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraints should be adjusted
so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower it, press the button on the post guide and push
downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support
Adjustable Head Restraint
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Heated Seats
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated. The
heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and
seatback. The controls for each heater are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
After placing the ignition in the ON position, you can
choose from High, Low or Off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for
Low and none for Off.
Heated Seat Switch
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If high level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu-
ous operation. At that time, the number of indicators
illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Easy Entry Seats
Pulling upward on the lever, located on the seatback,
allows the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide
forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt
from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to
retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the
rear seat.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Easy Entry Seats
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Rear Folding Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Catch
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlights and Parking Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the
RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking
brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for
normal nighttime driving.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off
the headlight switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and, if equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets,
door handles and cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired delay interval. There are
six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
multifunction lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
Tilt Steering Column
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the right-
side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the
speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push
and release the ON/OFF button again. The system and
the indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward to
SET DECEL and release. Remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
•
Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
•
Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different
size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
•
Softly tap the brake pedal.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the brake pedal, or press the clutch pedal to the
floor (manual transmission).
•
Pull the speed control lever toward you (CANCEL).
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a
1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever
in SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SET
DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease
until the lever is released. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have a collision. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink威) button and a power sunroof switch may
also be included, if equipped.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink威 Buttons
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
•
Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your
vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poi-
sonous when inhaled and cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
2. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Go™). Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs remove
the obstruction and press the switch forward and release
to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Lights” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned for-
ward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient
access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a
resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
CONSOLE FEATURES
Sliding Center Console Armrest
The center console armrest slides forward with three
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
and shifting ease.
Rear Cupholders
Sliding Console Armrest
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
various size coins). The center console may also be
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 162
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base ............... 163
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium ............ 164
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 165
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 178
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 180
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System ....... 181
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 182
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped ........................ 185
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped ........................ 186
▫ Compass Display .................... 186
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features) .......................... 188
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 189
4
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped .................... 192
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 192
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped ...................... 193
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio ..... 193
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio ..... 194
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 197
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 197
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 200
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 202
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 205
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 206
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 206
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 212
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 214
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 217
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 217
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 —
If Equipped .......................... 218
▫ Connecting The iPod威 ................. 219
▫ Using This Feature ................... 220
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
Buttons ........................... 220
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Play Mode ......................... 220
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................. 222
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES
Radios Only) ......................... 224
▫ System Activation .................... 224
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 224
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 225
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 225
▫ Reception Quality .................... 225
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 226
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 228
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped .......................... 228
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 230
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 231
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 232
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 232
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating System ..................... 232
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 237
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlets 5 — Heated Seat Switch 9 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — ESP OFF Switch 10 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Glove Compartment 7 — Hazard Warning Switch 11 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Control
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
Base Cluster
The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,
it means that the charging system is experiencing a
problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain
service immediately.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position. This light will also turn on while
the engine is running if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, then have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos-
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. They should
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Light” comes on continuously with the engine run-
ning, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or
the BAS system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
If the warning light remains on, the system may not
be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP
or BAS. You should adjust your speed and stopping
distance to account for this lack of the feature or you
could be in an accident and be seriously injured. You
should take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
15. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
Only
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ......................Fuel Saver Indicator
gASCAP ............Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Lo tirE ......................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ............... OilChange Required
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
habits and vehicle usage.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Lo tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
CHAngE OIL (Base Cluster)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the
following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more
door may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the
decklid may be ajar.
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass Display
•
Outside Temperature Display
•
Trip Computer Functions
•
Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped)
•
Uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped)
•
Audio Mode Display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS])
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps
(If Equipped), System Warnings, System Sta-
tus, and Personal Settings.
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also functions as a remote sound system con-
trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps
(If Equipped), System Status Messages, and
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System
Controls”.
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
screen will display radio and media mode
information depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
•
Left/Right Door Ajar
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Oil Change Required
•
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
Channel # Transmit
•
Channel # Training
•
Channel # Trained
•
Clearing Channels
•
Channels Cleared
•
Did Not Train
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime)
•
ESP Off – Electronic Stability Program is deactivated
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
•
Check Gascap
•
Key Fob Battery Low
•
Service Keyless System
•
Wrong Key
•
Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”)
•
1–4 SKIPSHIFT
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
•
Distance To Empty
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Fuel Saver Mode — On Fuel Saver Mode — Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing
the new ignition switch position.
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for more information.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
mation on the current surround mode.
•
Stereo
•
Video Surround
•
Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-
TION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
HOME button to display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
HOME
Button
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
•
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Compass Variance Map
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
•
Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
Language
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con-
tinue, the information will display in the selected lan-
guage.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan-
guage selection.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlamps Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,”
“45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.”
appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “MET-
RIC” appears.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/RBZ) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RER or RBZ user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System (VR) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER Radio
Uconnect™ gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock — RER
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit
Character Display
No program type
or undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type
16-Digit
Character Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 and REZ touch-screen radio UCI
feature, refer to the separate RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 or REZ
User’s Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an
option with these radios.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect Multimedia radio user’s manual for iPod or
external USB device support capability.
•
Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port located on the center
console. Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle’s UCI system (iPod威 may take a few
seconds to connect), the iPod威 starts charging and is
ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described
below.
NOTE:
•
It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to
connecting the cable.
•
If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Using This Feature
By using the provided connection cable to connect an
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK
>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticed.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-
menu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
NOTE: Dependent on the audio source, the output may
sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
VOLUME Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
Remote Sound System Controls
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
FUNCTION SELECT Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start
playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio
is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
SCROLL Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
Manual Temperature Control
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several selections of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIR-
CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times
and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode
is not allowed.
•
Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA-
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULA-
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push on this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A light will illu-
minate when the A/C System is en-
gaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Remote Start — If Equipped
During remote start operation, the climate control soft-
ware may override the climate control settings depend-
ing on the outside ambient temperature. The table below
explains the different scenarios that could occur during
remote start operation.
Once the driver enters the vehicle, the control will return
to the customer selected settings. This feature was de-
signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme
conditions. To enable the feature, customers must park
their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the
four blower speeds.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If Outside Ambient
Temperature Is
Mode Overrides To Temperature Overrides To Rear Window Defroster
Active
Less than 40°F Mix Full Heat Yes
Between 40°F and 80°F No Override No Override No
More than 80°F Bi-Level Full Cool No
NOTE:
•
The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with
the blower control set to the “O” (or OFF) position.
•
For maximum performance, it is recommended that
the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the
“High” (full clockwise) position.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used
for long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 245
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ....... 245
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ..... 246
▫ Keyless Go™ – If Equipped ............. 247
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 248
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below −20°F Or
−29°C) ............................ 250
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 251
▫ After Starting ....................... 252
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 252
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........ 253
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission .......... 253
䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 257
▫ General Information .................. 258
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 260
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 260
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override .......................... 260
5
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 262
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 262
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 266
▫ AutoStick威 — 3.5L Engine .............. 266
▫ AutoStick威 — 5.7L Engine .............. 266
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 268
▫ Acceleration ........................ 268
▫ Traction ........................... 268
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 269
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 269
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 271
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 272
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 273
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ....... 274
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ..... 274
䡵 Brake System ........................ 276
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped .......................... 276
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 279
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) –
If Equipped ........................ 279
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) –
If Equipped ........................ 280
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 280
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Only ................... 281
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If
Equipped .......................... 283
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Synchronizing ESP ................... 285
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light ............... 286
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 287
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 287
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 291
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 292
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 296
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 296
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 297
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 299
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 299
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 300
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 301
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 302
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 302
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 304
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 304
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 305
▫ Base System ........................ 308
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 310
▫ General Information .................. 314
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 314
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine (With Automatic
Transmission) ....................... 314
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) .... 315
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 315
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 315
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 316
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 317
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 317
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 317
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 318
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 319
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 319
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 321
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 322
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 322
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 322
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 322
▫ Overloading ........................ 323
▫ Loading ........................... 323
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 324
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 324
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 326
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ..................... 328
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 328
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 329
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 334
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 336
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
tion system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting with Integrated Key – Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-
tion.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Go™ – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter is in the passenger compart-
ment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position.
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button –
Automatic Transmission Only
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button – Manual
Transmission Only
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while
pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10
to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proce-
dure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, release the button.
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission
Only
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button – Manual Transmission Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
•
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
position.
•
If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
•
If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.
Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF
the Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition
switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
•
Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
•
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) – Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) – Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 sec-
onds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
•
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
•
Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result
in damage to the clutch and transmission.
•
Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission syn-
chronizer damage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
Manual Shifter
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom-
mended shift speed chart.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 5-6
3.73
mph 20 25 42
(km/h) (32) (40) (67)
3.91
mph 20 37 48
(km/h) (32) (59) (77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete
stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN
position for Keyless Go™), as compared to the ignition
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Go™). This
is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibi-
tor system.
•
Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis-
sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less.
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed
during these times.
When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is dis-
played, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have an accident.
CAUTION!
•
If you skip more than one gear while downshift-
ing or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
•
Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle
is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you
could damage the engine and/or clutch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
•
Altitude
•
Vehicle loading
•
Driving style
•
Shift lever position
•
Accelerator position
•
Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
•
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
•
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position
with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission
engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after
restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift
lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave unattended children inside a
vehicle.
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal
operation.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) and the en-
gine is not running. To move the shift lever out of the
PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to any
other ignition position (ACC, ON/RUN) position, and
the brake pedal must be pressed whether or not the
engine is running.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully
remove the override cover which is located to the right of
the shift lever.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
(RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port on the center console.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
With Keyless Go™ – If Equipped
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the in-
structions shown above to activate the override.
Interlock Manual Override
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Shift Lever
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless Go™) to
the ON position (RUN position with Keyless Go™).
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the ERS or AutoStick威 mode and select the
“3” range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever into the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick姞 — 3.5L Engine
AutoStick威 allows you to move the shift lever to the left
(-) or right (+) when the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, this allows the selection of the desired top gear.
For example, if you shift the transmission into third gear,
the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can
shift down to second or first gear automatically, when
needed.
Operation
Switching from AutoStick威 to DRIVE can be done at any
vehicle speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to AutoStick威
mode, move the shift lever to the left (-) once. The current
gear will be maintained as the top gear. To disable
AutoStick威, simply press and hold the shift lever to the
right (+) until ⬙D⬙ is displayed in the instrument cluster
odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
AutoStick姞 — 5.7L Engine
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in
the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission
will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. To
disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
(LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of
wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake,
firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake Release
Parking Brake
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
•
The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
possible.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
required.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the
Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission
models.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a
limited-slip differential (LSD) and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-
cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
Only
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal.
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESP OFF” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
20 seconds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should turn
on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If Equipped
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”
switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illumi-
nate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the
“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will turn off.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen-
tarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
CAUTION!
Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels,
as this can result in rear axle damage.
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SIZING TERMS
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure
—
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
Tire and Loading Information Placard
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing
rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto-
matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale
Light.”
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors, and
•
TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors,
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
•
TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC
will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM
Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................ 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.5L and 5.7L Engine (with Automatic
Transmission)
The 3.5L and 5.7L engine (with automatic
transmission) is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
5.7L Engine (with Manual Transmission)
The 5.7L engine (with manual transmis-
sion) is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap – Base Model
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap – R/T Model
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.5L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Load-
ing Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the AutoStick威 mode to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick威
−
By using the AutoStick威 mode and selecting a specific
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
highest gear range should be selected that allows for
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa-
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 339
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 339
䡵 TIREFIT Kit — If Equipped .............. 340
▫ TIREFIT Storage ..................... 341
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 341
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions ............. 343
▫ Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT ............. 345
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 351
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ........ 351
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 353
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire ............ 354
▫ Compact Spare Tire ................... 358
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation —
If Equipped ........................ 359
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 361
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 362
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 363
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 365
6
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 366
▫ Without The Key FOB ................. 366
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ........................... 367
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .................... 368
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument
panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116 °C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to
1
⁄
4
” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button — If Equipped
3. Pressure Gauge
4. Power Button
TIREFIT Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear with Yellow Cap)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit may be equipped with either of the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position for air pump operation only.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7)
when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose with the yellow cap)
(6) when selecting this mode.
Using the Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn ON the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn OFF the TIRE-
FIT kit.
Using the Deflation Button — If Equipped
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
•
Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-
tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
•
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) is a one tire
application use. After each use, always immediately
replace these components at an authorized dealer.
•
When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
•
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
•
You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or like inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than
1
⁄
4
” (6mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
•
Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the
TIREFIT kit.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
−
If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 0.24 in. (6 mm) or larger.
−
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
−
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
−
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
−
If the wheel has any damage.
−
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
•
Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat
source.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
•
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician im-
mediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
•
Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (located on the bottom of the air
pump) when operating the TIREFIT kit.
Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn OFF the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up to Use TIREFIT:
1. Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com-
partment (located on the bottom of the air pump) and
place them on your hands.
2. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
3. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the
yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
4. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
5. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
6. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and then insert the plug into
the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated
tire:
•
Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-
FIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL.
•
After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn OFF the TIREFIT
kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the sealant mode position and not air
mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn ON the TIREFIT
kit.
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if avail-
able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on air mode and
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As
the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The
Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approxi-
mately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indi-
cated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch
pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure
by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation
Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Securing TIRE-
FIT Sealant in the Tire”.
CAUTION!
•
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so should be handled carefully.
•
Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internal TIREFIT kit components which may
cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Immediately after injecting sealant, and inflating tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until
having the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow
this warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Follow Step (A) “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT”
before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) and connect it to the
valve stem.
3. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to on and inflate the tire to
the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa-
tion label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation
Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and
then reinstall the cap on the valve stem.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser-
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6).
2. Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in
the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch
the hoses (6) (7) from their storage area.
3. Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose (6) to
depress the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of
it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-
ing.
5.
Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) to the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of
the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the
bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing. Then,
press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be
heard, indicating the bottle is locked in place.
6. Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Opening The Access Panel
Spare Tire Fastener
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jack Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
Center Cap Removal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the
procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa-
tion” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
Jack Engagement Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
•
Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
•
This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
force to install the center cap.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2 — Remote Positive (+) Post
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-
ning the wheels, is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Key Fob
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km)
•
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h)
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to
be towed more than 15 miles (24 km) or faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), the vehicle must be transported using
a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km)
or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only
approved method of towing is with a flatbed
truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may
result.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L ............. 372
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 373
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 374
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................. 374
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 375
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 376
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 377
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 377
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 378
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 381
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 382
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 382
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 384
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 385
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 386
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 386
7
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 387
▫ Cooling System ..................... 390
▫ Brake System ....................... 395
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System – Manual
Transmission (If Equipped) ............. 398
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped ....... 398
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped ..... 399
▫ Rear Axle .......................... 401
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 401
䡵 Fuses .............................. 407
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) .......... 407
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center .......... 409
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 414
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 414
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 415
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models With
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped ....... 415
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
With High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped ............. 415
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ........... 416
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp .............. 417
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp .............. 419
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .......................... 419
▫ License Lamp ....................... 420
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert the key fob into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as
part of a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level – 3.5L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for
Keyless Go™). The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in
the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Go™).
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Clutch Hydraulic System – Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be at the
bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain
the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi-
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent, or any com-
mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abra-
sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do
not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
CAUTION!
•
When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Integrated Power Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Washer Motor
2 — 25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
3 — 25 Amp
Natural
Ignition Run/Start
4 — 25 Amp
Natural
EGR Solenoid/
Alternator
5 ———
6 — 25 Amp
Natural
Ignition Coils/Injectors
7 — 25 Amp
Natural
Headlamp Washer Relay
– If Equipped
8 — 30 Amp
Green
Starter
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
9 ———
10 30 Amp
Pink
— Windshield Wiper
11 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
12 40 Amp
Green
— Radiator Fan Lo/High
13 50 Amp
Red
— Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
14———
15 50 Amp
Red
— Radiator Fan
16———
17———
18———
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
19———
20———
21———
22———
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Access Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Rear Power Distribution Center
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing dur-
ing assembly. The ser-
vice replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow car-
tridge fuse.
2 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
3 ———
4 40 Amp
Green
— Integrated Power Mod-
ule (IPM)
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
5 30 Amp
Pink
— Heated Seats – If
Equipped
6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
7 — 15 Amp
Blue
Sub Amp – If Equipped
8 — 15 Amp
Blue
Diagnostic Link Connec-
tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-
trol Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
10———
11 * ———
12 * ———
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
13 * ———
14 — 10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Mod-
ule – If Equipped
15———
16———
17 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cluster
18 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
19 — 10 Amp
Red
Stop Lights
20———
21———
22———
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
23———
24———
25———
26———
27 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC)
28 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run, AC Heater
Control/Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC)
29 — 5 Amp
Orange
Cluster/Electronic Sta-
bility Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
30 — 10 Amp
Red
Door Modules/Power
Mirrors/Steering Con-
trol Module (SCM)
31———
32———
33———
34———
35 — 5 Amp
Orange
Antenna Module – If
Equipped/Power Mir-
rors
36 — 25 Amp
Natural
Hands-Free Phone – If
Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
37 — 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
38 — 10 Amp
Red
Cargo Light/Vehicle In-
formation Module – If
Equipped
39 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
40 — 5 Amp
Orange
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror/Heated Seats – If
Equipped/Switch Bank
41———
42 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp
Blue
— Amplifier/Sunroof – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps .............W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp ............. 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............578
Visor Vanity Lamps ..................... A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped...............194
Door Courtesy ..........................562
Shift Indicator Lamp ................. JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder ........LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) .........................D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp ....................9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp...................3157A
Front Fog Lamp ...................... PSX24W
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker ........................168
Tail Lamp ............................ 3057K
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp ...................3057K
Rear Side Marker ........................168
Backup Lamp ...........................921
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL).......LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License................................ 168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side
to disengage the clip.
NOTE:
•
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
14. Close the trunk.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.5 Liter Engine 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.5 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engine
– Automatic Transmission)
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine –
Manual Transmission)
91 Octane
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
Rear Axle – 3.5L Engine MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 (API GL-5) or equiva-
lent.
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) or equivalent
(with MOPAR威 Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control
System. These, and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L Engine).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (3.5L/5.7L Engines).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 445
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 445
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 445
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 445
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 445
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 446
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 446
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 446
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 447
▫ Service Contract ..................... 447
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 448
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 448
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 448
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 448
▫ In Canada ......................... 449
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-
485-2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ....................273,276
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............ 276,279
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........392
Adding Fuel ........................... 319
Adding Washer Fluid .....................386
Additives, Fuel ......................... 317
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 382
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 384
Air Conditioning ........................232
Air Conditioning Controls .................232
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............239
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............384,385
Air Conditioning System ................232,384
Air Pressure, Tires .......................297
Airbag .............................. 47,56
Airbag Deployment .......................57
Airbag Light .....................55,60,73,168
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 59
Airbag, Side ..........................53,56
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 50,53,56
Alarm Light ...........................174
Alarm, Panic ............................ 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................... 18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................225
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 391,421
Disposal ............................ 394
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 276,279
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............... 176,278
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Appearance Care ........................ 401
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ......... 18
Assistance Towing .......................100
Auto Down Power Windows ................33
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................31
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 81
Automatic Door Locks ................... 30,31
454 INDEX
Automatic Headlights ....................128
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ............. 172
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives ...................... 400
Automatic Transmission .............262,399,400
Adding Fluid ......................400,423
Autostick ............................266
Fluid and Filter Changes .................400
Fluid Change ......................... 400
Fluid Level Check ..................... 399
Fluid Type ...........................423
Shifting .............................262
Special Additives ...................... 400
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....265
Autostick .............................266
Axle Fluid ............................. 423
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............423
Battery ............................... 382
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Location ............................382
Belts, Seat ............................37,73
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............385
B-Pillar Location ........................292
Brake Assist System ...................... 280
Brake Control System, Electronic .............279
Brake Fluid ............................423
Brake, Parking .......................... 273
Brake System ........................276,395
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................276,279
Fluid Check .......................396,423
Master Cylinder ....................... 396
Parking .............................273
Warning Light ..................... 172,276
Brakes .............................276,395
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............260
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........70
Brightness, Interior Lights ..................133
10
INDEX 455
Bulb Replacement .....................414,415
Bulbs, Light .......................... 75,414
Calibration, Compass .....................187
Capacities, Fluid ........................421
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................... 319
Oil (Engine) ..........................380
Power Steering ........................ 272
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............393
Car Washes ............................402
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............72,318
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ................... 322
Cellular Phone ........................85,232
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 419
Certification Label .......................322
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 351
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 288
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............... 375
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 71
Checks, Safety ...........................71
Child Restraint ....................61,63,66,68
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............65,66
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 315
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 403
Windshield Wiper Blades ................386
Clock ........................193,194,198,208
Cold Weather Operation ...................250
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............231
Compact Spare Tire ......................299
Compass .............................. 186
Compass Calibration .....................187
Compass Variance .......................187
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 182
456 INDEX
Connector
UCI ................................218
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ......... 218
Conserving Fuel ........................182
Console ..............................156
Console, Floor ..........................156
Console, Overhead .......................141
Contract, Service ........................ 447
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 393
Cooling System .........................390
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 392
Coolant Capacity ......................421
Coolant Level ...................... 390,394
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 394
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................391
Inspection ...........................394
Points to Remember .................... 394
Pressure Cap ......................... 393
Radiator Cap ......................... 393
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 391,421,422
Corrosion Protection .....................401
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............137
Cruise Light ...........................165
Cupholders .........................155,406
Customer Assistance .....................445
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 60
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ........... 133
Daytime Running Lights ...................129
Dealer Service .......................... 377
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ................ 35
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................34
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 158
Defroster, Windshield ................... 73,234
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................134
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 374
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 131
10
INDEX 457
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..........................378
Power Steering ........................ 272
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................366
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............394
Engine Oil ........................... 381
Door Locks ............................. 29
Door Locks, Automatic ....................30
Door Opener, Garage .....................142
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ................... 268
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................269
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy ....182
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 83
Electrical Power Outlets ...................152
Electronic Brake Control System ............. 279
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ....409
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 137
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............283
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 166
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....178
Emergency Deck Lid Release ................35
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............365
Hazard Warning Flasher .................339
Jacking .............................351
Jump Starting .........................361
Overheating .......................... 339
Towing ............................. 366
Emergency Trunk Release ................... 35
Emission Control System Maintenance ......375,426
Engine ............................372,373
Air Cleaner ..........................382
Block Heater ......................... 252
Break-In Recommendations ................70
458 INDEX
Checking Oil Level .....................378
Compartment ......................372,373
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 390,422
Cooling .............................390
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 72,318
Fails to Start .......................... 251
Flooded, Starting ......................251
Fuel Requirements ..................... 314
Jump Starting .........................361
Oil ...........................378,421,422
Oil Change Interval ..................172,379
Oil Filler Cap ......................... 380
Oil Filter ............................381
Oil Filter Disposal ..................... 381
Oil Selection ....................... 379,421
Oil Synthetic .........................381
Overheating .......................... 339
Starting .............................245
Temperature Gauge .................... 166
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................380
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 57
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Ethanol ............................... 315
Event Data Recorder ...................... 60
Exhaust Gas Caution ................... 72,318
Exhaust System .......................72,387
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................82
Exterior Lighting ........................ 127
Exterior Lights ..........................75
Filler Location Fuel ...................... 319
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................382
Engine Oil ........................381,422
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 381
Flashers
Hazard Warning ....................... 339
Turn Signal ......................75,130,167
10
INDEX 459
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 131
Flat Tire Changing ....................... 351
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 251
Fluid, Brake ........................... 423
Fluid Capacities ......................... 421
Fluid Leaks .............................75
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................. 399
Brake ..............................396
Cooling System .......................390
Engine Oil ........................... 378
Power Steering ........................ 272
Fluids ................................422
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........422
Fog Lights .......................... 129,170
Folding Rear Seat ........................124
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................365
Fuel ................................. 314
Adding ............................. 319
Additives ............................317
Clean Air ............................ 315
Conserving ..........................182
Ethanol ............................. 315
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................... 319
Gasoline ............................ 314
Gauge .............................. 165
Materials Added .......................317
Methanol ............................315
Octane Rating ......................314,422
Requirements ......................... 314
Saver Mode .......................... 182
Specifications .........................422
Tank Capacity ........................421
Fuel Optimizer .........................182
Fuel Saver ............................. 182
Fuel System Caution ..................... 320
Fueling ............................... 319
Fuses ................................ 407
460 INDEX
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ........... 142
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............319,374
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................315
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................314
Conserving ..........................182
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................315
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................166
Fuel ............................... 165
Odometer ...........................170
Speedometer .........................165
Tachometer ..........................165
General Information ...............17,25,113,314
General Maintenance ..................... 377
Glass Cleaning .......................... 405
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 322,325
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............322,324
GVWR ............................... 322
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............. 85
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Shallow Standing Water ................. 269
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................339
Head Restraints ......................... 121
Headlights ............................415
Automatic ........................... 128
Bulb Replacement ...................... 415
Cleaning ............................ 405
Delay .............................. 128
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 131
Lights On Reminder .................... 129
On With Wipers .................... 128,135
Passing .............................131
Switch ..............................127
Time Delay .......................... 128
Heated Mirrors ..........................83
Heated Seats ...........................122
10
INDEX 461
Heater ............................... 232
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 252
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 131
Hill Start Assist .........................281
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 326
Holder, Cup ........................... 155
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 142
Hood Release .......................... 126
Ignition ............................... 14
Key...............................12,14
Ignition Key Removal ..................... 14
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 16
Infant Restraint ........................61,62
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 178
Instrument Cluster ....................163,165
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 162
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............406
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............407
Interior Appearance Care .................. 404
Interior Lights .......................... 133
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 134
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ........................... 351
Jack Operation ..........................354
Jacking Instructions ......................354
Jump Starting .......................... 361
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................16
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................185
Keyless Entry System ...................... 20
Keyless Go .......................12,185,247
462 INDEX
Keys .................................12
Kicker Sound System .....................228
Knee Bolster ............................ 47
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 130
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren) ....................65,66
Latches ................................75
Hood ..............................126
Lead Free Gasoline ......................314
Leaks, Fluid ............................75
Life of Tires ............................302
Light Bulbs .......................... 75,414
Lights ..............................75,127
Airbag ........................ 55,60,73,168
Alarm ..............................174
Anti-Lock .........................176,278
Automatic Headlights ...................128
Brake Assist Warning ...................286
Brake Warning ..................... 172,276
Bulb Replacement ................... 414,415
Center Mounted Stop ...................419
Courtesy/Reading ................... 132,141
Cruise .............................. 165
Daytime Running ...................... 129
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............. 130,131
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 286
Electronic Throttle Control Warning .........166
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 168
Exterior ..............................75
Fog .............................129,170
Hazard Warning Flasher .................339
Headlight Switch ...................... 127
Headlights ........................127,415
Headlights On Reminder ................. 129
Headlights On With Wipers ............ 128,135
High Beam ........................ 131,169
10
INDEX 463
High Beam Indicator ....................169
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............. 131
Illuminated Entry .......................20
Instrument Cluster ..................127,165
Intensity Control ......................133
Interior ..........................133,141
License .............................420
Lights On Reminder .................... 129
Low Fuel ............................ 176
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........176
Map Reading ......................132,141
Oil Pressure ..........................169
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .........133
Passing .............................131
Reading .......................... 132,141
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 169
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............. 174
Service ........................... 414,415
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 176
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 174
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........ 174,305
Traction Control .......................286
Turn Signal ......................75,130,167
Vanity Mirror ..........................84
Voltage ............................. 165
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....165
Loading Vehicle ......................322,323
Capacities ...........................323
Tires ...............................292
Locks .................................29
Auto Unlock .......................... 31
Automatic Door ........................30
Door ................................29
Power Door ........................... 30
Low Tire Pressure System .................. 305
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................65,66
Lubrication, Body .......................385
464 INDEX
Lumbar Support ........................121
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 382
Maintenance, General .....................377
Maintenance Procedures ...................377
Maintenance Schedule ....................426
Maintenance, Sunroof .....................152
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 176,375
Manual, Service .........................449
Manual Transmission ............... 253,398,401
Fluid Level Check ...................398,401
Map/Reading Lights .................. 132,141
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................396
Methanol ............................. 315
Mini-Trip Computer ......................182
Mirrors ................................81
Automatic Dimming ..................... 81
Electric Powered ....................... 83
Electric Remote ........................83
Exterior Folding ........................ 82
Heated .............................. 83
Outside .............................. 82
Vanity ............................... 84
Mode
Fuel Saver ........................... 182
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 305
Mopar Parts ......................... 376,448
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 315
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............130
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 70
Occupant Restraints ................... 36,53,57
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............50,53,56
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............314,422
Odometer ..........................165,170
Trip ............................. 165,170
10
INDEX 465
Oil Change Indicator ..................172,181
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 172,181
Oil, Engine ......................... 378,422
Capacity ............................ 421
Change Interval .................... 172,379
Checking ............................ 378
Dipstick .............................378
Disposal ............................ 381
Filter ............................ 381,422
Filter Disposal ........................381
Identification Logo ..................... 379
Materials Added to ..................... 381
Recommendation ................... 379,421
Synthetic ............................381
Viscosity ......................... 380,421
Oil Filter, Change ........................ 381
Oil Filter, Selection ....................... 381
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............374,375
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 142
Operating Precautions .................... 374
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............ 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................82
Overhead Console ....................... 141
Overheating, Engine ...................167,339
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,449
Paint Care ............................. 401
Panic Alarm ............................ 24
Parking Brake ..........................273
Passing Light ...........................131
Personal Settings ........................ 189
Pets .................................. 70
Phone, Cellular .......................... 85
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............. 85
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........292
Power
Brakes .............................. 276
Deck Lid Release .......................34
466 INDEX
Distribution Center (Fuses) ............... 409
Door Locks ...........................30
Mirrors ..............................83
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......... 152
Seats ............................... 118
Steering ..........................271,272
Sunroof .............................149
Windows .............................32
Power Steering Fluid .....................423
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............46
Preparation for Jacking .................... 353
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................ 44
Programmable Electronic Features ............189
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
Radial Ply Tires .........................299
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 393
Radio Operation ........................ 232
Radio Remote Controls .................... 230
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect™ studios) .......... 224
Rear Cupholder .........................156
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 124
Rear Window Defroster ...................158
Rear Window Features ....................158
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 60
Recreational Towing ...................... 336
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 315
Refrigerant ............................385
Release, Hood .......................... 126
Reminder, Lights On .....................129
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................44
Remote Control
Starting System ........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 230
Remote Starting System ....................26
10
INDEX 467
Remote Trunk Release ..................... 34
Replacement Bulbs .......................414
Replacement Keys ........................ 17
Replacement Parts .......................376
Replacement Tires .......................302
Reporting Safety Defects ...................448
Resetting Oil Change Indicator .............. 172
Restraint, Head ......................... 121
Restraints, Child .........................61
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 36
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................365
Rotation, Tires .......................... 304
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................73
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 75
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................448
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................72
Safety Information, Tire ................... 287
Safety Tips ............................. 71
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................225
Satellite Radio (Uconnect™ studios) ...........224
Schedule, Maintenance ....................426
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................406
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 44
Seat Belts .......................... 36,37,73
And Pregnant Women ................... 46
Child Restraint ................... 61,62,63,68
Extender .............................46
Front Seat .......................... 37,38
Inspection ............................73
Operating Instructions ................... 38
Pretensioners ..........................44
Rear Seat .............................37
Reminder ............................ 169
Untwisting Procedure .................... 42
Seats ................................. 118
Adjustment .......................... 118
Head Restraints ....................... 121
468 INDEX
Heated ............................. 122
Height Adjustment .....................118
Lumbar Support .......................121
Power .............................. 118
Rear Folding ......................... 124
Seatback Release ....................... 124
Tilting ..............................118
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 391,422
Selection of Oil .........................379
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service Assistance ....................... 445
Service Contract .........................447
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) .................... 176
Service Manuals ........................ 449
Setting the Clock ................ 193,194,198,208
Settings, Personal ........................ 189
Shift Indicator Light ......................256
Shifting ...............................257
Automatic Transmission .............. 257,262
Shoulder Belts ...........................37
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 238
Signals, Turn ...................... 75,130,167
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............... 268
Snow Tires ............................304
Sound System
Kicker ..............................228
Spare Tire .......................... 299,351
Spark Plugs ............................422
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................422
Oil ................................422
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............137
Speedometer ...........................165
Starting .............................26,245
10
INDEX 469
Automatic Transmission ................. 246
Cold Weather .........................250
Engine Fails to Start .................... 251
Remote .............................. 26
Starting and Operating ....................245
Starting Procedures ......................245
Steering
Column Controls ......................130
Column Lock .........................136
Power ...........................271,272
Tilt Column ..........................136
Wheel, Tilt ........................... 136
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............. 230
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................230
Storage ............................... 414
Storage, Vehicle ...................... 238,414
Storing Your Vehicle ......................414
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 365
Sun Roof ..............................149
Sunglasses Storage ....................... 141
Sunroof Maintenance .....................152
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 47
Sway Control, Trailer .....................325
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 381
System, Remote Starting ....................26
Tachometer ............................165
Telescoping Steering Column ...............136
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......166,340
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............65
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 136
Time Delay, Headlight ....................128
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........292
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 290
Tire Markings .......................... 287
Tire Safety Information .................... 287
470 INDEX
TIREFIT ..............................340
Tires ............................75,296,451
Aging (Life of Tires) .................... 302
Air Pressure ..........................296
Changing .........................351,354
Compact Spare ........................299
Flat Changing ........................351
General Information .................... 296
High Speed ..........................299
Inflation Pressures .....................297
Jacking ........................... 353,354
Life of Tires ..........................302
Load Capacity ........................292
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 305
Pressure Warning Light .................. 174
Quality Grading ....................... 451
Radial ..............................299
Replacement .........................302
Rotation ............................ 304
Safety ...........................287,296
Sizes ...............................288
Snow Tires ...........................304
Spare Tire ...........................351
Spinning ............................300
Trailer Towing ........................ 331
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 301
To Open Hood .......................... 126
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............328
Towing ............................... 324
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............100
Behind a Motor Home .................. 336
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 366
Guide ..............................328
Recreational .......................... 336
Weight ..............................328
Towing Assistance ....................... 100
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .........336
Traction Control .........................280
10
INDEX 471
Trailer Towing .......................... 324
Cooling System Tips ....................335
Hitches .............................326
Minimum Requirements .................329
Tips................................334
Trailer and Tongue Weight ...............328
Wiring ..............................333
Trailer Towing Guide .....................328
Trailer Weight ..........................328
Transfer Case
Fluid ...............................423
Transmission ........................... 399
Automatic ......................257,262,399
Fluid ...............................423
Manual .............................253
Shifting .............................257
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 142
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........20
Transporting Pets ........................ 70
Tread Wear Indicators ....................301
Trip Odometer ....................... 165,170
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .................... 34,35
Trunk Release, Emergency .................. 35
Trunk Release Remote Control ............... 34
Turn Signals ......................... 130,167
UCI Connector .........................218
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 85
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 451
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 218
Universal Transmitter .....................142
Unleaded Gasoline ....................... 314
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............42
472 INDEX
Vanity Mirrors ...........................84
Variance, Compass .......................187
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 322
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ................... 292,322,323
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .......................238,414
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 380
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 113
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 339
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............. 165
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 6
Warranty Information .....................448
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................386
Washers, Windshield ................134,135,386
Washing Vehicle .........................402
Water
Driving Through ...................... 269
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................403
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................403
Wind Buffeting .......................33,151
Window Fogging ........................238
Windows ..............................32
Power ...............................32
Windshield Defroster ...................... 73
Windshield Washers ................... 134,135
Fluid ...............................386
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................386
Windshield Wipers ....................... 134
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................386
Wiper, Delay ...........................134
Wipers, Intermittent ......................134
10
INDEX 473
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
10D491-126-AE
5th Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
